Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG Manualscomputers & electronicsM200E-Gold

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

MFL69942201 (1.0) www.lg.com

USER GUIDE

LG-M200E

Summary of content (228 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH USER GUIDE LG-M200E www.lg.com MFL69942201 (1.
PAGE 2
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺗﺷﮑﺭﻳﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺟﺯﺋﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺗﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ
PAGE 5
‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ 102‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻑ ﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪74‬‬
PAGE 6
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻧﻘﺽ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﭘﻳﺵ ﺁﻣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻁﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﻠﻭﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﻣﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﻋﻠﺕ ﺧﻁﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 7
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺭیﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻝ ‪ LG‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺩﻩﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺩﻝﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻁﻝ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺁﻓﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﻳﺩﺍً ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻧﺳﻳﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 8
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺧﺷﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻓﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺷﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﮔﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺗﯽ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺟﺗﻧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺭﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻭﭼﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺷﺩﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﻳﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﺭﮔﺯ ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﺑﺭﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫• ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻥﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ‬ ‫• ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ LG .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
PAGE 13
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻣﺟﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍکﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮔﻧﺟﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬ ‫• ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬ ‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﻭﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‪/‬ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻳﺵ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻘﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪(-/+‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪17‬‬
PAGE 19
‫• ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‪/‬ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ ‫ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﻧﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭ‬‫ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺷﺩﺕ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺯﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ‬ ‫ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﺎﻧﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻝ ﺯﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺳﺕ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻁﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.
PAGE 22
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺕﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻧﻭ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﭘﺭﺍﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﻪ ﮔﻡ ﺷﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻳﺑﯽ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ LG ،‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی(‬ ‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺯﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺎ ً ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻧﻭﻳﺳﻳﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺗﺭﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺩﺍی ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻳﻔﺗﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺗﺎﺑﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺕ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﮑﺗﻪ ﻣﻬﻡ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻧﺟﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 27
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭﺿﺭﻭﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 28
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﺭﺻﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻭﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺧﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺷﻧﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺱ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﺭﺑﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺻﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 32
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ‪ :Google‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﺎﺭی‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Google‬ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻝ ﺑﻭﻡﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺎ ً ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺭﮐﻳﺏ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ‪ +‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻧﺞ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪ GPS‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬ ‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﮑﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭی ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﭼﺭﺧﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻼﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺎﺧﻭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪﺍی ‪ ،Knock Code‬ﺍﻟﮕﻭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺩ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺷﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ LG‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻧﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻧﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ‪ ،KnockON‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺟﻠﻭی ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ‪/‬ﻧﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ‪Knock Code‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪Knock Code‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ Knock Code ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 42
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﻳﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ Smart‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻫﺎی ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺯﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺭﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﺗﺭ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﻫﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 45
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ‪ QWERTY ،QWERTZ‬ﻭ ‪ AZERTY‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﻓﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬ ‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﻓﺿﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﮐﻠﻳپ‬ ‫ﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
PAGE 50
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ SmartWorld‬ﻭ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Play‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﭘﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺗﺭک ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ؛‬ ‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﺻﺩﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﺩﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﻫﻣﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻡﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﺩﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻳﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﮑﻪ ﻧﻳﻔﺗﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5%‬ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 58
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ ،(-‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭ ﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻭﺩی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ‪ SD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬ ‫)ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪AE/AF lock‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻧﻭﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻭ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺟﻬﺗﯽ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻭ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺯﺍﻥ ‪ -/+‬ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺽ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﻔﻳﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺳﺗﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺁﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺳﻠﻔﯽﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺧﺻﯽﺳﺎﺯی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‬ ‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻭﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻣﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ‪ 7‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺑﻭﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺗﺎﺑﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﭘﺳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪ Google‬ﻧﻳﺯ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪ Google‬ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪QuickMemo+‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎی ﺧﻼﻗﺎﻧﻪﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬ ‫‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺋﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺑﻧﻭﻳﺳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺑﻧﺩی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﺑﻼً ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻬﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﻕ ﺑﻳﻔﺗﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺳﺭ ﮔﻳﺭی ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺯﺳﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺭﮐﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻡ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ”ﺷﻧﻳﺩﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ“ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺋﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺎ ً ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﺿﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪SmartWorld‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ SmartWorld‬ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ‪ SmartWorld ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺗﺭک‬ ‫ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 79
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ،Google‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،Google‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ،Google‬ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪،Google‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﺎ ‪ Play‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Drive‬ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺳﻭﻧﺩ ‪ *.ibf‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Google‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Google‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪Maps‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪Play‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ‪Play‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Play‬ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬
PAGE 83
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫• ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﻁﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺑﺭﮔﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫‪Wi-Fi Direct‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪Wi-Fi Direct‬‬ ‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺳﺎﺯی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺳﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺳﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ USB‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ (SSID) ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ‬ ‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪VPN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ VPN‬ﺭﻭی ‪ VPN‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭی ‪ VPN‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺻﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻟﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺷﺧﺻﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 1‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ /‬ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 2‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‪ :‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺿﻣﻭﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 95
‫• ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﮐﺎﻟﻳﺑﺭﺍﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺑﻬﺑﻭﺩ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺣﯽ ﺻﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﭼﺭﺧﺵ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 96
‫• ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺧﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺭﻭی ﮐﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﻝ ﺗﺧﻣﻳﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﮐﻡ ﺍﻧﺭژی‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ :Google‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﻭﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 97
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺑﺯﺭگ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﮑﻭﺱ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﮐﻧﺗﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺳﺗﺭی‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺳﺗﺭی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 98
‫• ﺁﻳﮑﻭﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﻭﺋﻳﭻ‪ :‬ﺗﺭﮐﻳﺏ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 99
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﻭﻳﺕ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺷﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻧﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻳﺭ ‪Play Store‬‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻭﺍﻫﯽ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﮔﻭﺍﻫﯽ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺭژی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‪ :‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺻﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﻗﻳﻣﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺩی ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :LG Backup‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺭﺳﺗﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺭﺩﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG Backup‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪05‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
PAGE 103
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫• ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬ ‫‬‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭘﻳﺵﻓﺭﺽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪LG Bridge‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪LG Bridge‬‬ ‫‪ LG Bridge‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ‪ LG Bridge Download Centre‬ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻭی ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺻﺏ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ LG Mobile‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬ﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ LG Mobile‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬ ‫)‪(OTA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ OTA‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭ ﺑﻪﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ‪ LG‬ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻣﺷﺗﺭک ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻥ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺷﮑﻼﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺎی ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﺑﺭﺍﺗﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻳﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻧﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺎی ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﺵ‬ ‫ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺳﻳﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﻥ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻳﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻧﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﭘﻭﺷﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺗﻣﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺯﺩﻳﺩﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺗﺵ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﺩ ‪ GPL ،LGPL ،MPL‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻣﺎی ‪ http://opensource.lge.com‬ﺩﻳﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺭ ﮐﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻬﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﭘﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﺱ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻭﺡ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﺗﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ )ﻧﻅﻳﺭ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﺩﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ opensource@lge.com‬ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻔﺭﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮏ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎی ﺷﻬﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﻟﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺕ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﻬﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.
PAGE 112
ENGLISH About this user guide Thank you for choosing this LG product. Please carefully read this user guide before using the device for the first time to ensure safe and proper use. • Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • This device is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touchscreen keyboard. • Descriptions are based on the device default settings.
PAGE 113
Instructional notices WARNING: Situations that could cause injury to the user and third parties. CAUTION: Situations that may cause minor injury or damage to the device. NOTE: Notices or additional information.
PAGE 114
Table of contents 5 Guidelines for safe and efficient use 01 02 Custom-designed Features Basic Functions 13 15 Multi-tasking feature quick share 17 18 20 21 22 24 24 29 32 39 42 43 44 49 Product components and accessories Parts overview Turning the power on or off Installing the SIM card Inserting the memory card Removing the memory card Battery Touch screen Home screen Screen lock Memory card encryption Taking screenshots Entering text Do not disturb 3
PAGE 115
03 04 Useful Apps Phone Settings 51 52 53 57 58 66 69 70 71 73 75 76 77 77 77 78 78 80 81 81 82 82 83 86 86 96 97 98 Installing and uninstalling apps Uninstalled apps Phone Messaging Camera Gallery Music E-mail Calendar QuickMemo+ Calculator Clock Downloads File Manager FM Radio Voice Recorder Contacts LG SmartWorld Tasks LG Backup RemoteCall Service Evernote Google apps Table of contents Settings Networks Sound & notification Display General 05 Appendix 107 107 108 110 113 114 LG Language Setting
PAGE 116
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Should a fault occur, a software tool is built into your device that will gather a fault log. This tool gathers only data specific to the fault, such as signal strength, cell ID position in sudden call drop and applications loaded. The log is used only to help determine the cause of the fault.
PAGE 117
• This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 5 mm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 5 mm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network.
PAGE 118
• Do not charge a handset near flammable material as the handset can become hot and create a fire hazard. • Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner or alcohol). • Do not charge the device when it is on soft furnishings. • The device should be charged in a well ventilated area. • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the device next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips.
PAGE 119
Efficient device operation Electronics devices All devices may receive interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Please consult your doctor to determine if operation of your phone may interfere with the operation of your medical device. • Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that you leave at least 15 cm of space between other devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker.
PAGE 120
Avoid damage to your hearing To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level.
PAGE 121
In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Turn your device off before boarding any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew. Children Keep the device in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available on all mobile networks. Therefore you should never depend solely on your device for emergency calls.
PAGE 122
• Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the device is fully charged to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger. • Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal’s teeth or nails, come into contact with the battery. This could cause a fire.
PAGE 123
01 Custom-designed Features
PAGE 124
Multi-tasking feature Multi window You can use two apps at the same time by separating the screen into the multiple windows. While using an app, touch and hold from the Home touch buttons, then select an app from the recently used apps list. • You can use two apps displayed on the main screen at the same time. • To stop the Multi window feature, touch and hold . • You can use this feature in an app that supports the Multi window feature.
PAGE 125
Overview screen The Overview screen provides a preview of your recently used apps. To view the list of recently used apps, tap on the Home, then tap the displayed app. • Touch and hold an app and drag it to the top of the screen to start the app with the Multi window. You can also tap at the top of each app.
PAGE 126
quick share You can share a photo or video to the app you want immediately after taking it. , then take a photo or record a video. 1 Tap 2 Tap the app icon that appears on the screen to share it using that app. You can also swipe the icon towards the opposite direction to see what other apps you can use to share your photos and videos. quick share icon • The app displayed by the quick share icon may vary, depending on the type and frequency of access to the apps installed on the device.
PAGE 127
02 Basic Functions
PAGE 128
Product components and accessories The following items are included with your device. • Device • Battery • Stereo headset • USB cable • Charger • Quick Start Guide • The items described above may be optional. • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the area and service provider. • Always use genuine LG Electronics accessories. Using accessories made by other manufacturers may affect your device's call performance or cause malfunctions.
PAGE 129
Parts overview Proximity/Ambient light sensor Front camera lens Earpiece Microphone Touch screen Stereo headset jack Microphone Rear camera lens Flash Power/Lock key Volume keys (+/-) Speaker Charger/USB cable port Basic Functions 18
PAGE 130
• Proximity/Ambient light sensor - Proximity sensor: During a call, the proximity sensor turns off the screen and disables touch functionality when the device is in close proximity to the human body. It turns the screen back on and enables touch functionality when the device is outside a specific range. - Ambient light sensor: The ambient light sensor analyses the ambient light intensity when the auto-brightness control mode is turned on.
PAGE 131
Turning the power on or off Turning the power on When the power is turned off, press and hold the Power/Lock key. • When the device is turned on for the first time, initial configuration takes place. The first booting time for the smart phone may be longer than usual. Turning the power off Press and hold the Power/Lock key, then select Power off. Power control options Press and hold the Power/Lock key, then select an option. • Power off: Turn off the device. • Power off and restart: Restart the device.
PAGE 132
Installing the SIM card Insert the SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card provided by your service provider to start using your device. 1 To remove the back cover, hold the phone firmly in one hand. With your other hand, lift off the back cover with your thumbnail as shown in the figure below. 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot with the gold-colored contacts facing downwards.
PAGE 133
• This device supports only Nano SIM cards. • For problem-free performance, it is recommended to use the phone with the correct type of SIM card. Always use a factory-made SIM card supplied by the operator. Precautions when using the SIM card • Do not lose your SIM card. LG is not responsible for damage and other issues caused by loss or transfer of a SIM card. • Be careful not to damage the SIM card when you insert or remove it. Inserting the memory card Insert the memory card into your device.
PAGE 134
2 Insert the memory card into the memory card slot. Memory card (optional) Upper slot • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. If you use an incompatible card, it may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Frequent writing and erasing of data may shorten the memory card lifespan.
PAGE 135
Removing the memory card Unmount the memory card before removing it for safety. Settings General Storage . 1 Tap 2 Remove the back cover and pull out the memory card. • Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. This may cause data to be lost or corrupted, or may damage the memory card or the device. LG is not responsible for losses that result from the abuse or improper use of memory cards, including the loss of data.
PAGE 136
2 Insert the battery. 3 To replace the cover onto the device, align the back cover over the battery compartment and press it down until it clicks into place. • Follow the instructions in this user guide cautiously when handling the device. Failure to do so may damage the device or cause injury to yourself or others.
PAGE 137
Removing the battery Open the back cover and pull out the battery. • Turn off the device before removing the battery. Failure to do so may damage the device. Charging the battery Before using the device, fully charge the battery. Connect one end of the charging cable to the charger, insert the other end of the cable into the cable port, and then plug the charger into a power socket.
PAGE 138
• Make sure to use the USB cable provided with your device. • Make sure to use an LG-approved charger, battery and charging cable. Charging the battery with a third-party charger may cause the battery to explode or may damage the device. • Using the device when it is charging may cause electric shock. To use the device, stop charging it. • Remove the charger from the power socket after the device is fully charged. This prevents unnecessary power consumption.
PAGE 139
Using the battery efficiently Battery lifespan may decrease if you keep many apps and functions running simultaneously and continuously. Cancel background operations to increase battery life. To minimise battery consumption, follow these tips: • Turn off the Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi network function when not using them. • Set the screen timeout to as short a time as possible. • Minimise the screen brightness. • Set a screen lock when the device is not used.
PAGE 140
Touch screen You can familiarise yourself with how to control your device by using touch screen gestures. Tapping Lightly tap with your fingertip to select or run an app or option. Touching and holding Touch and hold for several seconds to display a menu with available options.
PAGE 141
Double-tapping Tap twice quickly to zoom in or out on a web page or map. Dragging Tap an item, such as an app or widget, then move your finger to another location in a controlled motion. You can use this gesture to move an item. Swiping Tap the screen with your finger and move it quickly without pausing. You can use this gesture to scroll through a list, a web page, photos, screens, and more.
PAGE 142
Pinching and spreading Pinch two fingers to zoom out such as on a photo or map. To zoom in, spread your fingers apart. • Do not expose the touch screen to excessive physical shock. You might damage the touch sensor. • A touch screen failure may occur if you use the device near a magnetic, metallic or conductive material. • If you use the device under bright lights, such as direct sunlight, the screen may not be visible, depending on your position.
PAGE 143
Home screen Home screen overview The Home screen is the starting point for accessing various functions and apps on your device. Tap on any screen to directly go to the Home screen. You can manage all apps and widgets on the Home screen. Swipe the screen left or right to view all installed apps at a glance. To search for an app, use Google search. Home screen layout You can view all apps and organise widgets and folders on the Home screen.
PAGE 144
• Status bar: View status icons, the time and the battery level. • Weather widget: View the information of weather and time for a specific area. • Google search widget: Perform a Google search by inputting spoken or written keywords. • Folder: Create folders to group apps by your preferences. • Page icon: Display the total number of Home screen canvases. Tap the desired page icon to go to the page you selected. The icon reflecting the current canvas will be highlighted.
PAGE 145
Editing the Home touch buttons You can rearrange the Home touch buttons or add frequently used functions to the Home touch buttons area. Settings Display Home touch buttons Button Tap combination and customise the settings. • Several functions, including Notification panel and Capture+, are provided. A maximum of five items can be added. Status icons When there is a notification for an unread message, calendar event or alarm, the status bar displays the corresponding notification icon.
PAGE 146
Mute mode is on GPS is on Hotspot is on No SIM card • Some of these icons may appear differently or may not appear at all, depending on the device's status. Refer to the icons according to the actual environment in which you are using the device. • Displayed icons may vary, depending on the area or service provider. Notifications panel You can open the notifications panel by dragging the status bar downward on the main screen.
PAGE 147
Switching the screen orientation You can set the screen orientation to automatically switch, according to the device's physical orientation. On the notification panel, tap Rotation from the quick access icon list. Settings Display and activate Auto-rotate You can also tap screen. Editing the Home screen On the Home screen, touch and hold on an empty space, then select the desired action from below. • To rearrange the Home screen canvases, touch and hold on a canvas, then drag it to another location.
PAGE 148
Viewing the background theme You can view only the background image by hiding the apps and widgets on the Home screen. Spread two fingers apart on the Home screen. • To return to the original screen, which displays apps and widgets, pinch your fingers on the Home screen or tap . Moving apps on the Home screen On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it to another location.
PAGE 149
Using folders from the Home screen Creating folders On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it over another app. • A new folder is created and the apps are added to the folder. Editing folders On the Home screen, tap a folder and do one of the following actions. • To edit the folder name and colour, tap the folder name. • To add apps, touch and hold an app, then drag it over the folder and release it. • To remove an app from the folder, touch and hold the app and drag it to outside the folder.
PAGE 150
Screen lock Screen lock overview Your device's screen turns off and locks itself if you press the Power/Lock key. This also happens after the device is left idle for a specified period of time. If you press the Power/Lock key when a screen lock is not set, the Home screen appears immediately. To ensure security and prevent unwanted access to your device, set a screen lock. • Screen lock prevents unnecessary touch input on the device screen and reduces battery consumption.
PAGE 151
Secure start-up settings When you select Knock Code, Pattern, PIN or Password as a screen lock method, you can configure your device to be locked whenever turning on the device in order to secure your data. • You cannot use all functions, except for emergency calls until you unlock the device. • If you forget your decryption password, you cannot restore encrypted data and personal information. Lock screen settings You can customise the following lock screen settings. Settings Display Lock screen.
PAGE 152
• Available setting items may vary, depending on the selected screen lock method. KnockON You can turn the screen on or off by double-tapping the screen. • This option is available only on the Home screen provided by LG. It may not function properly on a custom launcher or on the Home screen installed by the user. • When tapping the screen, use your fingertip. Do not use a fingernail.
PAGE 153
Creating a Knock Code Settings Display 1 Tap Lock screen Select screen lock Knock Code. 2 Tap the squares in a pattern of your choice to create a Knock Code and tap NEXT. 3 Input the created Knock Code again for verification, then tap CONFIRM. Unlocking the screen with a Knock Code Unlock the screen by inputting the Knock Code you have created. Input your Knock Code on the touch screen when the screen is turned off. • It is also possible to enter a Knock Code when the lock screen is turned on.
PAGE 154
• To encrypt the memory card, make sure that a screen lock is set using a PIN or password. • Once memory card encryption starts, some functions are not available. • If the device is turned off while encryption is underway, the encryption process will fail, and some data may be damaged. Therefore, be sure to check if the battery level is sufficient before starting encryption. • Encrypted files are accessible only from the device where the files were encrypted.
PAGE 155
Entering text Using the Smart keyboard You can use the Smart keyboard to enter and edit text. With the Smart keyboard, you can view text as you type without bothering to alternate between the screen and a conventional keyboard. This allows you to easily find and correct errors when typing. Moving the cursor With the Smart keyboard, you can move the cursor to the exact position you want. When typing text, touch and hold on the space bar and then drag left or right.
PAGE 156
Suggesting words Smart keyboard automatically analyses your usage patterns to suggest frequently used words as you type. The longer you use your device, the more precise the suggestions are. Enter text, then tap a suggested word or gently drag the left or right side of the space bar upwards. • The selected word is automatically entered. You do not need to manually type every letter of the word. Changing the QWERTY keyboard layout You can add, delete or rearrange keys on the bottom row of the keyboard.
PAGE 157
• This option is available on the QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY keyboards. • This function may not be supported for some languages. Customising the keyboard height You can customise the keyboard height to maximise hand comfort when typing. 1 Tap Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height. 2 Adjust the keyboard height.
PAGE 158
Splitting the keyboard You can split the keyboard in half and place each piece on either side of the screen when the screen is in landscape mode. Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Tap Keyboard height and layout Split keyboard. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout Split keyboard. • Rotate the device to landscape mode to split the keyboard to both sides. To merge or split the keyboard, pinch together or spread apart your fingers on the keyboard.
PAGE 159
Entering text by using voice On the keyboard, touch and hold and then select . • To maximise the voice command recognition, speak clearly. • To enter text with your voice, make sure that your device is connected to a network. • To select the language for voice recognition, tap Languages on the voice recognition screen. • This function may be not supported, or the supported languages may differ depending on the service area.
PAGE 160
Clip Tray If you copy or cut an image or text, it is automatically saved to the clip tray and can be pasted to any space at any time. 1 On the keyboard, touch and hold and select . You can also touch and hold the text input window, then select CLIP TRAY. 2 Select and paste an item from the clip tray. • A maximum of 20 items can be saved to the clip tray. • Tap to lock saved items in order not to delete them, even when the maximum quantity is exceeded. A maximum of ten items can be locked.
PAGE 161
03 Useful Apps
PAGE 162
Installing and uninstalling apps Installing apps Access an app store to search and download apps. • You can use SmartWorld, Play Store or the app store provided by your service provider. • Some app stores may require you to create an account and sign in. • Some apps may charge fees. • If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage, depending on your pricing plan. • SmartWorld may not be supported depending on the area or service provider.
PAGE 163
Uninstalling by using the settings menu Tap Settings General Apps, select an app, then tap Uninstall. Uninstalling apps from the app store To uninstall an app, access the app store from which you download the app and uninstall it. • Some apps cannot be uninstalled by users. Uninstalled apps You can view the uninstalled apps on the Home screen. You can also reinstall apps which were uninstalled within 24 hours from now. Uninstalled apps.
PAGE 164
Phone Voice call Make a phone call by using one of the available methods, such as manually entering a phone number and making a call from the contact list or the list of recent calls. Making a call from the keypad Dial. 1 Tap 2 Make a call by using a method of your choice: • Enter a phone number and tap . • Touch and hold a speed dial number. • Search for a contact by tapping the initial letter of a contact name in the contact list, and then tap .
PAGE 165
Answering a call To answer a call, drag to the outside of the circle on the incoming call screen. • When the stereo headset is connected, you can make calls by using the call/end button on the headset. Settings • To end a call simply by pressing the Power/Lock key, tap Networks Call Common Answer and end calls, then turn on End calls with the Power key. Rejecting a call To reject an incoming call, drag across the incoming call screen.
PAGE 166
Functions accessible during a call During a call, you can access a variety of functions by tapping on-screen buttons: • Contacts: View the contact list during a call. • End: End a call. • Dialpad: Display or hide the dial pad. • Speaker: Turn on the speakerphone function. • Mute: Mute your voice so that your voice cannot be heard by the other party. • Bluetooth: Switch the call to a Bluetooth device that is paired and connected. • : Access additional call options.
PAGE 167
Viewing call records To view recent call records, tap Call logs. Then, you can use the following functions: • To view detailed call records, select a contact. To make a call to the selected contact, tap . Delete. • To delete call records, tap • The displayed call duration may differ from the call charge. Consult with your service provider for more information. Configuring call options You can configure various call options. 1 Tap 2 Tap Dial or Call logs.
PAGE 168
Messaging Sending a message You can create and send messages to your contacts using the Messaging app. • Sending messages abroad may incur additional charges. Consult with your service provider for more information. . 1 Tap 2 Tap . 3 Specify a recipient and create a message. . • To attach files, tap • To access optional menu items, tap . 4 Tap Send to send the message. Reading a message You can view exchanged messages organised by contact. . 1 Tap 2 Select a contact from the message list.
PAGE 169
Camera Starting the camera You can take a photo or record a video to cherish all of your memorable moments. . Tap • Before taking a photo or recording a video, wipe the camera lens with a soft cloth. • Be careful not to stain the camera lens with your fingers or other foreign substance. • If the battery level is lower than 5%, charge the battery before using the camera. • Images included in this user guide may be different from the actual device. • Photos and videos can be viewed or edited from the Gallery.
PAGE 170
Taking a photo 1 Tap the subject to focus the camera on. 2 Tap to take a photo. • You can also press the Volume Down (-) or Volume Up (+) key to take a photo. • When the screen is turned off or locked, start the camera by pressing the Volume Down (-) key twice. To activate this function, tap Settings General Shortcut keys and turn on the Shortcut keys feature. Recording a video 1 Tap the subject to focus the camera on. 2 Tap . • To take a photo while recording a video, tap .
PAGE 171
HDR Obtain photos or videos in vivid colours, and get compensated effects even when they are taken against the light. These functions are provided by the high dynamic range (HDR) technology equipped in the camera of the device. Timer Set the timer to automatically take photos after a specified period of time. Cheese shutter Take photos with voice commands. Tag locations Save the image with GPS location data.
PAGE 172
Burst shot You can take continuous shots of photos to create moving pictures. On the camera screen, touch and hold . • Continuous shots are taken at a fast speed while is held down. • Up to thirty (30) continuous photos can be taken. Simple view You can take photos by simply tapping the screen. Simple view to hide menus on the camera screen. Tap Tap display them.
PAGE 173
Switching between cameras You can switch between the front and rear cameras to suit your environment. On the camera screen, tap or drag the screen in any direction to switch between the front and rear cameras. • Use the front camera to take selfies. See Selfie shot for details. Zoom in or out You can use zoom in or out on the camera screen while taking a photo or recording a video. • On the camera screen, pinch or spread two fingers to zoom in or out, then use the displayed +/- slide bar.
PAGE 174
Selfie shot You can use the front camera to view your face on the screen and take selfies. Gesture shot You can take selfies by using gestures. Show your palm to the front camera and then clench your fist. You can also clench your fist and then open it towards the front camera. • In three seconds, a photo is taken. • To use this feature, switch to the front camera mode, then tap Selfie shot Gesture shot. • Make sure that your palm and fist are within the reference line so that the camera can detect them.
PAGE 175
Auto shot You can use the face detection feature to take selfies easily and conveniently. You can set the device so that, when you look at the screen, the front camera detects your face and takes a selfie automatically. • The white coloured guide frame appears when the front camera detects your face. If the subject within the guide frame stops moving, the guide frame colour turns blue, then the camera takes a photo. • To use this feature, switch to the front camera mode, then tap Selfie shot Auto shot.
PAGE 176
Interval shot You can take selfies at an interval. While using the front camera, touch and hold . • You can also use this feature in Gesture shot mode. Show your palm to the front camera and then clench your fist twice quickly. • Four photos are taken at about two seconds interval after a timer delay of three seconds. Save as flipped Before taking a photo with the front camera, tap The image is flipped horizontally. Save as flipped.
PAGE 177
Gallery Gallery overview You can view and manage photos and videos saved on your device. 1 Tap . • Saved photos and videos are displayed by folder. 2 Tap a folder and select a file. • View the selected file in full-screen mode. • While viewing a photo, swipe left or right to view the previous or next photo. • While viewing a video, swipe left or right to rewind or fast-forward the video. • Some file formats may not be supported, depending on the installed software.
PAGE 178
Viewing photos Back to the previous screen. Access additional options. Delete images. Add to or remove from your favourites. Share images. Start the camera. Edit images. • To display the menu items, gently tap the screen. To hide the menu items, tap the screen again. Editing photos 1 While viewing a photo, tap . 2 Use a variety of effects and tools to edit the photo. 3 Tap SAVE to save changes. • The changes are overwritten to the original file. Save copy.
PAGE 179
• To adjust the sound volume, drag the right side of the video screen up or down. • To adjust the screen brightness, drag the left side of the video screen up or down. Deleting files You can delete files by using one of the following options: • Touch and hold a file from the file list, then tap Delete. • Tap from the file list and delete the desired files. • Deleted files are automatically moved to Trash and they can be restored to the Gallery within 7 days. Trash. Tap to completely delete the files.
PAGE 180
Music You can play and manage songs or music albums. LG Music. 1 Tap 2 Select a category. 3 Select a music file. Switch to the playlist. Back to the previous screen. Search for music files. Access additional options. Add or delete favourites. Play in random order. Adjust the sound volume. Tap to play from the beginning of the current file / Double-tap to play the previous file / Touch and hold to rewind. Select a repeat mode. Open the music library.
PAGE 181
E-mail E-mail overview You can register an email account to your device and then you can check and send emails from your device. • If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information. Registering email accounts When you use the email app for the first time, register your email account. E-mail. 1 Tap Select an email service provider.
PAGE 182
Checking email 1 Tap and select a mail box. 2 Select an email from the email list. • The email message appears. Sending email 1 Tap . 2 Enter the recipient’s email address. 3 Enter a subject and message. . • To attach files, tap • To access optional menu items, tap . 4 Tap to send the email. Calendar Calendar overview You can use the calendar to manage events and tasks. Adding events Calendar. 1 Tap 2 Select a date and then tap . 3 Enter event details and tap Save.
PAGE 183
Syncing events Tap Calendars to sync, and select a calendar to sync. • When your events are saved from the device to your Google account, they are automatically synced with the Google calendar, too. Then, you can sync other devices with the Google calendar in order to make those devices have the same events that your device has and to manage your events on those devices. Event pocket You can use the event pocket to create events.
PAGE 184
QuickMemo+ QuickMemo+ overview You can make creative notes by using a variety of options on this advanced notepad feature, such as image management and screenshots, which are not supported by the conventional notepad. Creating a note 1 Tap 2 Tap • • • • • • • • QuickMemo+. to create a note. : Save a note. : Undo the last action. : Redo the last action you undid. : Enter a note by using the keypad. : Write notes by hand. : Erase handwritten notes.
PAGE 185
Writing notes on a photo 1 Tap 2 Tap QuickMemo+. to take a photo, then tap OK. • The photo is automatically attached into the notepad. 3 Tap or to write notes on the photo. • Write notes by hand on the photo. • Enter text below the photo. 4 Tap to save the note. Writing notes on a screenshot 1 While viewing the screen you want to capture, drag the status bar downwards and then tap . • The screenshot appears as the notepad background theme. Memo tools appear at the top of the screen.
PAGE 186
Managing folders You can view notes grouped by the type of the notes. QuickMemo+. 1 Tap 2 At the top of the screen, tap • • • • • • • and select a menu item: All memos: View all notes saved in QuickMemo+. My memos: View notes created by QuickMemo+. Photo memos: View notes created by . Capture+: View notes created by . Trash: View deleted notes. New category: Add categories. : Rearrange, add or delete categories. To change the name of a category, tap the category.
PAGE 187
Clock Alarm You can set an alarm to trigger it at a specified time. Clock Alarm. 1 Tap Tap to add a new alarm. 2 3 Configure the alarm settings and tap SAVE. • If you select a previously set alarm, you can edit the alarm. • To delete an alarm, tap at the top of the screen. You can also touch and hold the alarm. World clock You can view the current time in cities around the world. 1 Tap 2 Tap Clock World clock. and add a city.
PAGE 188
Stopwatch You can use the stopwatch to record a lap time. Clock Stopwatch. 1 Tap 2 Tap Start to initiate the stopwatch. • To record a lap time, tap Lap. 3 Tap Pause to suspend the stopwatch. • To resume the stopwatch, tap Resume. • To clear all the records and newly start the stopwatch, tap Reset. Downloads You can view, delete or share files downloaded via the Internet or apps. Tools Downloads. Tap File Manager You can view and manage files saved on your device or cloud.
PAGE 189
Voice Recorder You can record and save your voice or others’ voices from important events. Recorded voice files can be played back or shared. Tools Voice Recorder. 1 Tap 2 Tap . • To pause recording, tap . 3 Tap to end recording. • The file is saved automatically and the pre-listen screen appears. 4 Tap to play the recorded voice. • To save the location details of recording, tap Location. • To add an event, tap Event and add an event to the date you want. • If you tap , recorded voice files appear.
PAGE 190
Importing contacts You can import contacts from another storage device. 1 On the contact list screen, tap Manage contacts Import. 2 Select the source and target locations of the contact you want to import, and then tap OK. 3 Select the contacts and tap IMPORT. Adding contacts to the speed dial list 1 On the contact list screen, tap Speed dial. 2 Tap Add contact from a speed dial number. 3 Select a contact.
PAGE 191
Deleting contacts You can delete contacts by using one of the following options: • On the contact list screen, touch and hold a contact you want to delete, then tap Delete contact. Delete on the contact list screen. • Tap Adding favourites You can register frequently used contacts as favourites. 1 On the contact list screen, select a contact. 2 On the contact detail screen, tap . Creating groups New group. 1 On the contact list screen, tap Groups 2 Enter a new group name.
PAGE 192
Downloading SmartWorld app If SmartWorld app is not installed, follow these steps to download it. 1 Tap Settings General About phone Common Update Center App Updates. 2 From the list, select SmartWorld and tap Download. Tasks You can register tasks to your device to easily manage schedules. LG Tasks. 1 Tap 2 Tap to add a task. 3 Enter task details and then tap SAVE. LG Backup You can back up, restore and move the data saved on your device. 1 Tap Management LG Backup.
PAGE 193
• Data in a Google account will not be backed up. When you synchronise your Google account, Google apps, Google contacts, Google calendar, Google memo app data and apps downloaded from Play store are stored on the Drive app automatically. • Backup files are saved with the file extension *.lbf under the LG Backup folder on the memory card or internal storage. • Fully charge the battery before backing up or restoring data to avoid unintentional powering off during the process.
PAGE 194
Google apps You can use Google apps by setting a Google account. The Google account registration window appears automatically when you use a Google app for the first time. If you do not have a Google account, create one from your device. For details on how to use an app, see the Help in the app. • Some apps may not work depending on the area or service provider. Chrome Sign in to Chrome and import opened tabs, bookmarks and address bar data from a computer to your device.
PAGE 195
Maps Find your location or the location of a place on the map. View geographical information. Photos View or share photos or albums saved on your device. Play Movies & TV Use your Google account to rent or purchase movies. Purchase content and play it anywhere. Play Music Purchase music files from the Play Store. Play music files saved on your device. Sheets Create spreadsheets or edit spreadsheets created online or from another device. Share and edit spreadsheets together with others.
PAGE 196
04 Phone Settings
PAGE 197
Settings You can customise the device settings in accordance with your preferences. Settings. Tap • Tap and enter a keyword in the search box to access a setting item. • Tap to change the view mode. This user guide assumes that you are using the Tab view. Networks Dual SIM card You can configure Dual SIM settings. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Dual SIM card. 2 Customise the following functions: • SIM card 1: Change the name and icon of the SIM card 1.
PAGE 198
Wi-Fi You can connect to nearby devices over a Wi-Fi network. Connecting to a Wi-Fi network 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks to activate it. 2 Drag Wi-Fi. • Available Wi-Fi networks appear automatically. 3 Select a network. • You may need to enter the network's Wi-Fi password. • The device skips this process for previously accessed Wi-Fi networks. If you do not want to automatically connect to a certain Wi-Fi network, touch and hold the network and then tap Forget network.
PAGE 199
Wi-Fi Direct You can connect your device to other devices that support Wi-Fi Direct to share data directly with them. You do not need an access point. You can connect with more than two devices by using Wi-Fi Direct. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Wi-Fi Advanced Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Direct. • Nearby devices that support Wi-Fi Direct automatically appear. 2 Select a device. • Connection occurs when the device accepts the connection request. • The battery may drain faster when using Wi-Fi Direct.
PAGE 200
Bluetooth You can connect your device to nearby devices that support Bluetooth to exchange data with them. Connect your device to a Bluetooth headset and a keyboard. This makes it easier to control the device. Pairing with another device 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks to activate it. 2 Drag Bluetooth. • Available devices appear automatically. • To refresh the device list, tap SEARCH. • Only devices set as visible are displayed on the list. 3 Select a device from the list.
PAGE 201
Mobile data You can turn on or off mobile data. You can also manage mobile data usage. Turning on mobile data 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks to activate it. 2 Drag Mobile data. Customising mobile data settings 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Mobile data. 2 Customise the following settings: • Mobile data: Set to use data connections on mobile networks. • Limit mobile data usage: Set a limit for mobile data usage to block mobile data if the limit is reached.
PAGE 202
Tethering USB tethering You can connect the device to another device via USB and share mobile data. 1 Connect your device and other devices via USB cable. 2 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering USB tethering and then drag to activate it. • This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information. • When connecting to a computer, download the USB driver from www.lg.com and install it on the computer.
PAGE 203
Wi-Fi hotspot You can set the device as a wireless router so that other devices can connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Wi-Fi hotspot and then drag to activate it. 2 Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot, and enter the Wi-Fi name (SSID) and password. 3 Turn on Wi-Fi on the other device, and select the name of the device network on the Wi-Fi list. 4 Enter the network password.
PAGE 204
Bluetooth tethering A Bluetooth-connected device can connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Bluetooth tethering and then drag to activate it. 2 Turn on Bluetooth on both devices, and pair them. • This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information. • More information is available at this web site: http://www.android.
PAGE 205
More Airplane mode You can turn off the call and mobile data functions. When this mode is on, functions that do not involve data, such as games and music playback, remain available. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More Airplane mode. 2 Tap TURN ON in the confirmation screen. Mobile networks You can customise mobile data settings. 1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More Mobile networks. 2 Customise the following settings: • Network mode: Select a network type.
PAGE 206
• This feature is available only when the screen lock is activated. If the screen lock is deactivated, a notification screen appears. Tap SETTINGS from the notification screen to activate the screen lock. See Configuring screen lock settings for details. 3 Enter VPN details and tap SAVE. Configuring VPN settings 1 Tap a VPN from the VPNS list. 2 Enter the VPN user account details and tap CONNECT. • To save the account details, select the Save account information checkbox.
PAGE 207
Sound & notification You can customise sound, vibrate and notification settings. On the settings screen, tap Sound & notification and customise the following settings: • Sound profile: Change the sound mode to Sound, Vibrate only, or Silent. • Volume: Adjust the sound volume for various items. • SIM1 ringtone/SIM2 ringtone: Select a ringtone for incoming calls. Add or delete ringtones. • Ringtone ID: Create a ringtone for an incoming call from a particular contact.
PAGE 208
Display You can customise detailed settings for each screen type. On the settings screen, tap Display and customise the following settings: • Home screen: Customise settings for the Home screen. See Home screen settings for details. • Lock screen: Customise lock screen settings. See Lock screen settings for details. • Theme: Select a screen theme for your device. • Home touch buttons: Rearrange Home touch buttons or change their background colours. Hide Home touch buttons on the screen.
PAGE 209
• More Motion sensor calibration: Correct the angle and speed of the motion sensor to improve the tilt accuracy and speed of the sensor. • When correcting the motion sensor, make sure to place the device on a flat surface. Failure to do so may cause an error with the motion sensor functions, such as automatic screen rotation. General Language & keyboard You can customise language and keyboard settings for your device. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Language & keyboard.
PAGE 210
Location You can customise how your location information is used by particular apps. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Location. 2 Customise the following settings: • Mode: Select a method to provide your location information. • RECENT LOCATION REQUEST: View apps that recently requested location information. • Low power location estimation: Estimate the device location by using low power consumption. • Google Location History: Configure the Google location history settings.
PAGE 211
Accessibility You can manage accessibility plug-ins installed on your device. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Accessibility. 2 Customise the following settings: • Vision TalkBack: Set the device to notify screen status or actions via voice. • Vision Message/call voice notifications: Set the device to read the caller information or message content via voice. • Vision Font size: Change the font size. • Vision Bold text: Bold the text on the screen. • Vision Display size: Zoom in or out the screen.
PAGE 212
• Hearing Turn off all sounds: Mute all sounds and lower volume on the receiver. • Hearing Audio type: Select the audio type. • Hearing Sound balance: Adjust the audio output balance. Use the slide bar to change the balance. • Motor & cognition Touch assistant: Turn on the touch board to make buttons and gestures easier to use. • Motor & cognition Touch input: Enter text by touching and holding the screen or modify it by simply touching the screen.
PAGE 213
Shortcut keys You can use the volume keys to directly launch apps when the screen is turned off or locked. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Shortcut keys. to activate it. 2 Drag • Press the Volume Down (-) key twice to launch the Camera app when the screen is locked or turned off. Press the Volume Up (+) key twice to launch Capture+. Google services You can use Google settings to manage your Google apps and account settings. On the settings screen, tap General Google services.
PAGE 214
• Credential protection: View the type of the storage where the security certificate will be saved. • Certificate management: Manage the security certificate saved on the device. • Trust agents: View and use trust agents installed on the device. • Screen pin: Fix the app screen so that only the currently active app can be used. • Usage access: View details on usage of apps on the device. Date & time You can customise date and time settings for your device.
PAGE 215
Battery & power saving You can view the current battery information or turn on power-saving mode. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Battery & power saving. 2 Customise the following settings: • Battery usage: View the battery usage details. To view more details, select a specific item. • Battery percentage on status bar: Display the remaining battery level as a percentage on the status bar.
PAGE 216
Backup & reset You can back up data saved on your device to another device or account. Reset the device, if necessary. 1 On the settings screen, tap General Backup & reset. 2 Customise the following settings: • LG Backup: Back up or restore the blocked sender list, messages, images, home screens and other data saved on the device. See LG Backup for details. • Back up my data: Back up your app data, Wi-Fi password and other settings to the Google server.
PAGE 217
05 Appendix
PAGE 218
LG Language Settings Select a language to use on your device. Settings General Language & keyboard Language • Tap ADD LANGUAGE, and select a language. - Touch and hold and drag it to the top of the language list to set it as a default language. LG Bridge LG Bridge overview LG Bridge is an app that helps you manage the photos, music, videos and documents saved on your LG smartphone from your computer conveniently. You can back up contacts, photos and more to the computer or update the device software.
PAGE 219
Installing LG Bridge on a computer 1 Go to www.lg.com from your computer. 2 In the search bar, enter the name of your device. 3 Click Download Centre LG Bridge, and download the setup file. • Click Details to view the minimum requirements for installing LG Bridge. Phone software update LG Mobile phone software update from the Internet For more information about using this function, please visit http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp, select your country and language.
PAGE 220
LG Mobile Phone software update via Overthe-Air (OTA) This feature allows you to conveniently update your phone’s software to a newer version via OTA, without connecting a USB cable. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device. First check the software version on your mobile phone: Settings General About phone Common Update Tap Center Software Update Check now for update.
PAGE 221
FAQ This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures SIM card error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection/ Dropped network Codes do not match Move toward a window or Signal is weak or you are into an open area.
PAGE 222
Message Calls not available Phone cannot be turned on Possible causes Possible corrective measures Dialling error New network not authorised. New SIM card inserted. Check for new restrictions. Pre-paid charge limit reached. Contact service provider or reset the limit with PIN2. On/Off key pressed too briefly. Press the On/Off key for at least two seconds. Battery is not charged. Charge battery. Check the charging indicator on the display. Battery is not charged. Charge battery.
PAGE 223
Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Files do not open Unsupported file format Check the supported file formats. The screen does not turn on when I receive a call. Proximity sensor problem If you use a protection tape or case, make sure it has not covered the area around the proximity sensor. Make sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean.
PAGE 224
Anti-Theft Guide Set up your device to prevent other people from using it if it's been reset to factory settings without your permission. For example, if your device is lost, stolen, or wiped, only someone with your Google account or screen lock information can use the device. All you need to make sure your device is protected is: • Set a screen lock: If your device is lost or stolen but you have a screen lock set, the device can't be erased using the Settings menu unless your screen is unlocked.
PAGE 225
More information Open Source Software Notice Information To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download.
PAGE 226
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, LG Electronics declares that this LG-M200E product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.lg.
PAGE 227
Disposal of your old appliance 1. All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities. 2. The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. 3.
PAGE 228